JP5857325B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a feature in a production means is provided. An effect that is executed when the gauge of a continuous hitting meter RD is full can be started when a continuous hitting operation is performed with an effect button 136e after the continuous hitting operation effect is started. Moreover, it can start also when long press operation by the production button 136e is performed. The effect display by the pseudo ream, which is executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e generated after the second time, is the case where the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136e is performed rather than when the long press operation by the effect button 136e is performed. Is easier to get started. [Selection] Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  In conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in display means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
The one of the display of a plurality of types of display, display prompting that you pummeled the operating means to the player (hereinafter. Referred to as "third display"), and
Before SL first display, after the display of the third display is started, a display if there is a display is started when the operation means is battered,
It said first display, after the display of the third display is started, a display if there is a display is initiated when the operation means is pressed long,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display, after the display of the fourth display is started, a display displayed when the operation means is 2 or more times the operation in some cases that will be initiated,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operation means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the operation part 136 shown in FIG. 1, (b) is a figure which shows the operation part 136 typically. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initial setting of an effect movable object is performed. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of the game 200, an operation unit 136 for receiving various operations by the player, and an effect button lamp that is built in the operation unit 136 and emits light from the operation unit 136. 38, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the balance of the player, And a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in many colors. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. In the present embodiment, the operation unit 136 functions as an operation means that can be operated by a player. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting unit that can emit light from the inside of the operation unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 3 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 174, a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an effect unit capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 also controls a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, an effect button lamp 138 provided in the operation unit 136). The driver circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and various buttons (details will be described later) of the operation unit 136 are pressed. An operation unit sensor 426 to be detected, a sensor circuit 428 for outputting detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404 are read out. A display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 and the image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are connected VDP434 to display the (video display processor), the.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. This voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 402 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the output circuit, game control is started (first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates a RAM clear switch 180 provided on a power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If the first special figure starting port 230 is won and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is received from the winning counter value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. Update processing is performed.

  In step S311, when the pressing of various buttons on the operation unit 136 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the various buttons is performed.

  In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, a mission achievement determination process (details will be described later) is performed. In step S325, an original mode control process (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process ends.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  In step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-described low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a specific configuration of the operation unit 136 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating the operation unit 136 illustrated in FIG. 1, and FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically illustrating the operation unit 136.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the operation unit 136 includes six buttons, that is, an upper button 136a, a lower button 136b, a left button 136c, a right button 136d, an effect button 136e, and a clear button 136f. . In the following description, in order to simplify the description, among the components of the operation unit 136, the up button 136a, the down button 136b, the left button 136c, the right button 136d, and the effect button 136e are illustrated in FIG. ) In some cases.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function for performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of the effect button 136e. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136e is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more, and the continuous hit operation is the effect button 136e. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed multiple times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136e. In the present embodiment, in a state where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 200 ms interval) is performed in a pseudo manner while the effect button 136e is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136e, the long press auto-strike function is performed by the effect button 136e in order to appropriately perform the single operation by the effect button 136e. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 11 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136e a plurality of times is performed in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the special symbol variable display. The decorative pattern variation pattern in which the re-variable display is performed once or a plurality of times after the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in all of the symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. Point to. In other words, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo-variation that makes it appear that the decorative symbol is fluctuated a plurality of times with respect to a variation display of one special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 that is variably displayed in accordance with the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 and the 4th symbol t1, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color shown in the circle changes into a plurality of types. Yes. In FIG. 11 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. The displayed symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern t1 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In addition, a hold display area is provided at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this hold display area, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 and the second special figure 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold in FIG. h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold in FIG. 1, and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold in FIG. Has been. In FIG. 11A, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 is turned on. Is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode (default hold icon), and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-pending mode (for example, a grayed-out hold icon). In addition, it is good also as a mode which replaces with the display in the aspect which is not on hold, and does not display a hold icon.

  In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying a variable icon is provided. The variation icon has, for example, a display form related to the special figure hold display, and is displayed in the same display form as the hold display. For example, the change icon can execute a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) according to the display mode. The variation icon is deleted after the variation display is started. Note that the erase timing of the change icon is not limited to this. For example, the change icon may be deleted when the change display ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11B, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11C, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11D, the third stop is performed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol GG including the character display of “continue” is stopped and displayed in a fluctuation manner in the middle symbol display area 208b. This pseudo-continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed, so that the player can expect whether or not pseudo-ream will occur.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11 (e), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e, and the remaining period for receiving the effect button press is left. A remaining time meter MT representing time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous pattern GG. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136e is acceptable.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 11 (f), as shown in FIG. 11 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 results in the operation of the effect button 136e. An effect display is performed to the effect that the effect display is started and the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Specifically, the display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed is displayed above the decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c change again, respectively. The first pseudo-continuous production is started. That is, the second variation display of decorative symbols is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 11 (i), after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. The third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. By stopping and displaying this pseudo-continuous symbol GG, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the second pseudo-ream will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as shown in FIG. Meter MT is also displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136e is acceptable.

  After that, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136e is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 11 (k), as shown in FIG. 11 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e, An effect display is made to the effect that the display of the variation of the decorative pattern for the third time by the pseudo-ream starts after the effect is successful. Specifically, a display of “× 3” indicating that the third variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed is displayed above the decorative symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (m), the second pseudo-continuous production is started.

  In the above-described effect example, the effect button image BT is displayed every time an effect (sometimes referred to as a “pseudo continuous generation effect”) that indicates whether or not to generate a pseudo continuous generation is executed, and the pseudo continuous generation effect is generated a plurality of times. Since the effect button image BT is also displayed a plurality of times because it is executed, the effect button image BT displayed at a time is one, and the display of the effect button image BT is intermittently generated every time the pseudo-continuous effect is generated. Indicates that it will be done.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the production button 136e was pressed and the production was successful. However, when the pseudo-continuous production is not started, for example, the effect of the production button 136e is that the production has failed. The effect display may be executed, and the stop display may be performed with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols. In addition, after the effect display indicating that the effect has failed is executed, the display may be stopped with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one press operation (single operation) by the effect button 136e. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136e is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136e by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of operations can be performed using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a repeated operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the effect button 136e is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even when the operation of the effect button 136e can be accepted. Further, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in blue) different from the light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136e is an example of a first operation mode. Further, the long press operation for a predetermined time or longer by the effect button 136e is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode.

  Then, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect display by the pseudo-continuous executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e generated after the second time is the first operation. The first production that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the mode, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said an example.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect display by the pseudo-continuous executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e generated after the second time is the second operation. It is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation means is operated the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means. be able to. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic repeated hitting function is in an effective state, the effect display by the pseudo continuous action executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136e is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 12 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136e a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Here, the chance eye is an aspect in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of symbols having the same color), and is an aspect of the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12A, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are chances is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 12 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode, and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-hold mode.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12B, together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The characters “PUSH” are displayed, and a remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period of the effect button press is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136e is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 12C, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the left symbol display area 208a as shown in FIG. 12D. The chance symbol “A” that has been made is changed to a Tono-sama symbol YM1 that imitates Tono-sama's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM1, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 that are displayed superimposed on the Tonama symbol YM1 are erased, and the Tonama symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. Note that the timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set as appropriate. For example, the timing is before the timing at which the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing when the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. The same applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  Also, when the depressing button 136e is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the middle symbol display area 208b as shown in FIG. 12 (f). The chance symbol “B” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM2, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 12 (e), the state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased and the state in which the press operation by the effect button 136e is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136e may be simultaneously performed, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136e, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136e is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 that are displayed superimposed on the Tonama symbol YM2 are deleted, and the Tonama symbol YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  Also, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136e is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 12G, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c as shown in FIG. The chance symbol “C” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM3, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 12 (g), the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased and the state where the press operation by the effect button 136e is performed at the same time. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted, the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136e may be performed at the same time, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136e, the effect button image BT2 and The remaining time meter MT2 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136e is pressed, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 that are displayed superimposed on the Tonama symbol YM3 are erased, and the Tonama symbol YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen, and super reach is achieved. “SP reach” is displayed to indicate the transition. It should be noted that even if there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136e, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be deleted.

  In the effect example described above, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative symbol, and a plurality of these effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and each time the effect button 136e is operated, the effect button images BT1 to BT1 are displayed. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the effect button 136e is pressed and the effect is successful, and all the chance symbols are changed to the Tono-sama symbols, and the transition is made to super reach, but after the chance eye effect is performed, In the case of not shifting to the super reach, for example, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e, Change the display from a chance symbol to a symbol different from the Tono-sama symbol (for example, an evil agent model that imitates the face of an evil agent), inform you that you will not move to Super Reach, and then use a combination of decorative patterns You may make it display a stop.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136e. For example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136e by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of operations can be performed using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a repeated operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the effect button 136e is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tonosama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tosama symbol YM3. The production can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and also when the one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first production that can be started.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the effect that the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the first operation mode and the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the 2nd production which is easy to start. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, an effect in which the chance symbol is changed to a ton-like symbol as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136e is operated in the first operation mode. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the means, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Can do.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 13 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136e a plurality of times is performed during the decorative symbol variation display. In this effect example, a cut-in effect is displayed in which a cut-in image is displayed every time a pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13A, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the text “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and a remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and a remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Further, in FIG. 13A, the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, so the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold in the second special figure hold lamp 220. All lamps are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 13B, the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  When a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136e, as shown in FIG. 13C, “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT1 displayed on the center left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is deleted and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136e does not decrease. The update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136e is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13D, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13E, the decorative design display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the effect button 136e. Will be resumed.

  After that, for example, at the timing when one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 13G, the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 indicate that one second has passed, that is, the gauge is Furthermore, it is displayed in a mode of decreasing by 1 second.

  Then, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136e, “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT2 displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 13 (h). And the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. The update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136e is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. In addition, the second cut-in image CI2 has a larger display range in the vertical direction than the first cut-in image CI1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13L, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the operation reception of the effect button 136e is resumed. Is done.

  After that, for example, at the timing when one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 13 (m), the remaining time meter MT3 shows that one second has passed, that is, the gauge is further reduced by one second. Is displayed in the manner described above.

  When one press operation is performed by the effect button 136e, as shown in FIG. 13 (n), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT3 displayed on the central right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. "And the remaining time meter MT3 are displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the above-described production example, the example in which the cut-in image is displayed as a successful production every time the production button 136e is pressed and the production button 136e is pressed is shown. The cut-in image may be displayed for only one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136e, and the cut-in image is displayed in any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

  Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the push operation of the effect button 136e is not performed. At this time, it is good also as a different display mode by the case where pressing operation of the production button 136e is performed, and the case where it is not performed, and good also as the same display mode.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136e. For example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136e by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of operations can be performed using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a repeated operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the effect button 136e is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. At this time, as soon as it becomes possible to accept the operation of the effect button 136e, a pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state where the operation of the effect button 136e can be accepted. In some cases, three cut-in images can be displayed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and the effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed are The first operation mode can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations, and the second operation mode can be started even when the operation unit performs one operation. It can be said to be an example of one production.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and an effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is easier to start when a second number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operating mode than when a single operation is performed by the operating means in the second operating mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second production. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the effect in which the cut-in image is displayed as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136e is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 14 (a-1) to (a-6) show a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136e during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 14 (b-1) to (b−). 6) shows a state in which an effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136e when the auto button function is in an effective state. Here, the auto button function is a function for performing a single operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner even if the operation of the effect button 136e is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136e. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136e. Further, in a state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of the single operation, the long press operation, and the continuous operation are enabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136e. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A-1, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state. If the operation button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 may emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color of light emission is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136e is in the second state when it is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 14 (a-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (a-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Note that the light emission color is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136e is in the first state when it is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 14A-4, as shown in FIG. 14A-5, the effect button image BT displayed together with the effect button image BT is displayed. The characters “PUSH” are erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds.

  Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 14A-6, the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, after the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed, the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are erased as shown in FIG. 14 (a-5). The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, but such display may not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14B-1, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light indicating that the auto button function is enabled. Note that the light emission color is not limited to green, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that the production button 136e is in the third state when the auto button function is in a valid state.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins at the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 14 (b-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 14B-3, and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed.

  Thereafter, when half of the period during which the production button 136e has been pressed has elapsed, a single operation with the production button 136e is performed in a pseudo manner at the timing shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (b-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds. The

  Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 14B-6, the cut-in image CI <b> 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT as shown in FIG. 14B-5 after the effect button 136e is artificially operated by the auto button function. Is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge is 0 seconds remaining, but such display may not be performed.

  In the production example described above, an example is shown in which a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when a single operation is performed using the production button 136e, but the production is successful. The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136e. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the production button 136e. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the effect button 136e is artificially operated by the auto button function is performed by a single operation by the effect button 136e. The content of the effect executed when the effect button 136e is simulated by the auto button function is the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136e is operated. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed in the case of, or may be different.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 14, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between a state in which a normal operation of the effect button 136e in the effect of the single operation can be accepted and a state in which the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In FIGS. 15 (a-1) to (a-7) and FIGS. 15 (b-1) to (b-8), a hold change notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136e is performed. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a-1), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 15 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is 3, three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. Is displayed. Note that a variable icon display region 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 15 (a-2), the number of the variable display hold in the special figure 1 is increased to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp The four hold lamps at 218 are lit. Then, in the reserved display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136e, an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started as shown in FIG. 15 (a-3). In FIG. 15A-3, an animation in which the hold icon displayed in a circle extends in the horizontal direction and changes to an ellipse is displayed. At this time, the effect button image BTH is continuously displayed, but may be deleted when the effect button 136e is operated. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15 (a-3) to 15 (a-5), the hold icon extends in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction only for a predetermined effect execution period (for example, 2 seconds). The animation continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (a-6), after the animation that the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (a-7), the hold icon Changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 15 (b-1), the state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is shown. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when the symbol stop display timing is reached, as shown in FIG. 15 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is “decoration 2” − “decoration”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols. 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”is finalized. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been.

  In this state, for example, even if a single pressing operation with the effect button 136e is performed, as shown in FIG. 15 (b-3), an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is displayed. Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136e is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. Note that the operation of the effect button 136e may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbol. Here, the stop display of a symbol may be a stop display of a special figure or a stop display of a decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (b-4), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is erased after moving to the variable icon display area 284, and the second special figure 1 hold display h12 is displayed. The animation icons for moving the hold icons respectively displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed.

  After the symbol variation display is started as described above, when one press operation is performed by the effect button 136e, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (b-5). The animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b-5) to (b-6), the hold icon is extended in the vertical direction only for a predetermined effect execution period. Animation display that extends in the horizontal direction is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (b-7), after the animation that the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 15 (b-8). It changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  In the above-described effect example, an example in which a single operation by the effect button 136e is performed, and when the single operation is performed, a display is performed in which the hold icon is changed as a result of the effect being successful, but the single operation is performed. For example, when a single operation by the effect button 136e is performed, an animation that deforms the hold icon is displayed, and then the default display is displayed again. You may make it perform the effect display used as an aspect.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136e. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the production button 136e. It may be. In this case, for example, when the symbol change display ends and the stop display is displayed during the long press operation, after the next symbol change display is started, the effect button 136e is pressed again to perform the long press operation. It may be necessary to continue the long press operation even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. In this case, for example, when the symbol change display is terminated and stopped during the long press operation, the effect button is displayed to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function after the next symbol change display is started. 136e may be required to be pressed again, or the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be continuously effective even when the long-pressing operation is continued even during the symbol stop display. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. Also, the auto button function may be enabled so that the operation of the effect button 136e is performed in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 16 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136e is performed in super reach. In the example of production shown in FIG. 16, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are provided for the sake of convenience. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state in which none is held.

  In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the first special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and corresponds to this. Thus, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1.

  Then, after the transition to super reach as shown in FIG. 16C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Press the button” prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. Display is performed.

  When the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is performed once at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (e), as shown in FIG. 16 (f), the effect movable body 224 is moved to the initial position (the first position indicated by the chain line). (Position) to a position (second position) indicated by a solid line.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a single operation with the effect button 136e is performed, and when the single operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves as if the effect was successful, but even if a single operation is performed, If the production fails, the production movable body 224 may be prevented from moving. Further, when a single operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the movement because the effect has failed.

  In the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136e. For example, the result of the operation is produced by performing a long press operation with the production button 136e. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be produced by performing a continuous hitting operation with the production button 136e. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136e is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, or the position may be moved at the first position, or from the first position to the second position. You may make it move gradually toward. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. For example, the display as shown in FIG. 16D is performed and the operation of the effect button 136e can be accepted. If the effect button 136e is continuously pressed from the front, the effect movable body 224 moves assuming that the effect button 136e is pressed in a pseudo manner when the operation of the effect button 136e becomes possible. It may be configured to. Thereafter, in a state where the effect button 136e continues to be pressed and when another effect that operates the effect button 136e is generated, the effect button 136e is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or produced (in other words, the operation result is displayed or produced even when the production button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the same operation is performed when the button is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or produced), or the long-press auto-strike function may be invalidated so that the effect button 136e is not pressed in a pseudo manner. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 17 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. Also, in this effect example, a special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the second special symbol display device 214, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color represented in the square mark changes into a plurality of types. It is. As shown in FIG. 17 (a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. Is displayed in a definite manner with a display result of deviation (for example, a white square mark). In FIG. 17 and below, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. The symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player. In FIG. 17A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 17 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. In this production example, the timing at which the variation icon h00 is deleted is the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may also be before the start of reach production. Note that the change icon h00 is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode when displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 17C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when the depressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 17 (f). The

  In the production example described above, an example is shown in which a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when a single operation is performed using the production button 136e, but the production is successful. The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136e. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the production button 136e. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Moreover, in the production example described above, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 18 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, in the state where the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation accepting state may be basically set. In this case, the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, or the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned on. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, the operation is not always not accepted. Good.

  In FIG. 18 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 18B, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 18C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. At this time, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136e is not accepted. In order to accept the operation, it is necessary to once release the effect button 136e and then press the effect button 136e again.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (e) to 18 (f), the effect button 136e continues to be pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, and then the timing is as shown in FIG. 18 (g). When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the button 136e elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (h), a cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136e is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, and is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. A cut-in image in a display mode may be displayed.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 19 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 19A, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the auto button function is in a valid state, and a character display of “auto setting” indicating that is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press auto-strike function is disabled.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19B, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 19 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (d)”. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. In addition, the green light emission mode which shows that the auto button function is in a valid state may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (e) to FIG. 19 (f), after the effect button 136e continues to be pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136e) at the timing of FIG. 19 (g). When 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation was accepted, the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136e is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), a cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

  In this effect example, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136e is operated in a pseudo manner, the display differs from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIGS. 17 (f) and 18 (h). The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 20 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 20A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 20 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 20B, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (d)”. The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hit operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This repeated hitting meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136e. When the gauge is full, it is configured that the notice effect is executed as if the effect was successful. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20 (e) to 20 (g), when the repeated operation by the effect button 136e is performed, the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136e. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, a display indicating that the effect has failed has been shown. However, the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136e is hit.

  In this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed, and is an example of a third effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto repetitive strike function is disabled, the effect that is executed when the gauge of the repetitive strike meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be set to the second state during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e. In other words, the effect button lamp 138 may not emit light, or may emit blue light.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 21 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 21A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 21 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d)”. The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136e after the display as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 21 (e) to 21 (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the pressing of the effect button 136e is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses at the timing of FIG. 21 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the production example described above, an example in which a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136e by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, the display indicating that the production has failed is shown. If the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full after 4 seconds, it may be possible to give a notice of a cut-in image or a notice of a big hit, assuming that the production has been successful. In other words, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first operation mode. It can be said that the production of is configured to be able to start.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the operation result (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the same operation result (first effect) is displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. It can be said that it is displayed.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 22 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 22A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 22 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in a valid state, and the player continues to press the effect button 136e before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 22 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (d)”. The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 22 (e) to 22 (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this effect example, since the player has already started the long press operation of the effect button 136e, the pseudo consecutive hit operation is started when the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses at the timing of FIG. 22 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the production example described above, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136e by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, an indication that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. That is, when the operation means is being operated for the second time, the first effect can be started as if the operation means was operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times. It can be said that it is composed.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 23 shows a state where an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 23A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 23 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 23B, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (d)”. The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 23 (h), when the repeated operation by the effect button 136e is performed, the gauge of the repeated hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136e. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off every time the effect button 136e is pressed, and emits red again when the press operation is released, so that it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136e. Sometimes it can be recognized. Alternatively, each time the effect button 136e is pressed, light may be emitted in a different color (eg, blue).

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses at the timing of FIG. 23 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, a display indicating that the effect has failed has been shown. However, the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136e is hit.

  In the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 blinks only once when the effect button 136e is first pressed. Also good.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 24 shows a state in which the effect by the continuous operation of the effect button 136e is performed and the hold change notice is simultaneously performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 24A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 24 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 24B, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 24C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136e after the display as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (e) to FIG. 24 (g), the continuous hitting operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the pressing of the effect button 136e is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Further, in this production example, a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the above-described repeated hitting production, and the number of fluctuation display suspensions of the special figure 1 increases to 4, FIG. 24 (f). As shown in FIG. 4, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the pending change notice is started. However, in this effect example, priority is given to the continuous hit effect that was being executed, and the operation of the effect button 136e accepts only the hit operation related to the repeat hit effect, and the operation of the effect button 136e related to the pending change notice is at least the repeat hit effect. Will not be accepted until.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e has elapsed at the timing of FIG. 24 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In this effect example, after the repeated striking effect is completed in this way, the operation of the effect button 136e related to the pending change notice is accepted. At this time, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is kept in an effective state, and when the effect button 136e is continuously pressed, the hold change notice is started by a pseudo operation of the effect button 136e. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled when the continuous hitting effect is finished, and it is necessary to press the effect button 136e again. It should be noted that during the execution of repeated hitting effects, the operation of the effect button 136e related to the hold change notice can be accepted, and the repeated hit effect and the hold change notice may be executed simultaneously. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136e related to the hold change notice may be accepted by the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, or after the hold change notice is started, the long press operation of the effect button 136e is temporarily performed. It may be configured to be able to execute the hold change notice by canceling and performing the pressing operation of the effect button 136e again.

  In the production example described above, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136e by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, an indication that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful.

  Also, in this effect example, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted in the repetitive strike effect, and are held only by the operation of the first effect button. You may be comprised so that a change notice can be started. In this case, for example, for the second effect button, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the first effect button is operated to hold and change while holding the second effect button for long press operation. A notice can be started.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 25 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 25A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 25 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (d)”. The text “Hold the meter by pressing and holding” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. This long press meter NO is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the accumulated time that the effect button 136e is pressed. It is configured to be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 25 (e) to 25 (g), when the long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136e. . The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses at the timing of FIG. 25 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the example of the effect described above, an example is shown in which a long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed, and as a result of the long press operation, a display indicating that the effect has failed has been shown, but the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In the case of a tan, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. Whether or not the gauge of the long press meter NO can be filled is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to make the gauge of the long press meter NO full, the gauge will not become full no matter how long the effect button 136e is kept pressed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136e is long pressed during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 26 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 26A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 26 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 26A, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. In this effect example, since the effect button 136e has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136e is not accepted, and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order to accept the operation, it is necessary to once release the effect button 136e and operate (long press) the effect button 136e again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), FIG. 26 (f)..., After the effect button 136e is continuously pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, the timing of FIG. When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is zero. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (h), since the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and “unfortunately…” to that effect. Display is performed.

  In the production example described above, when the long press production is started in a state where the production button 136e is continuously pressed, the operation of the production button 136e is not handled effectively, but the production button 136e Even when the long press effect is started while being continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136e may be handled effectively.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136e is long pressed during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 27 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136e in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 27A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 27 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136e at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (d)”. “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284.

  And in this example of an effect, as shown in Drawing 27 (e)-the same figure (g), not a long press operation with effect button 136e but a continuous hitting operation is performed by the player. Even when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases in accordance with the time during which the effect button 136e is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 25, since the time during which the effect button 136e is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the increase amount of the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136e, regardless of whether or not the operation button 136e is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136e has elapsed at the timing of FIG. 27 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136e has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the production example described above, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation is performed by using the production button 136e in the long press production, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. However, the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 28 (a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which a conversation notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 136e, and FIGS. b-2) shows a state in which a hold change notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136e. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect based on the conversation contents of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. .

  In FIG. 28 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is 3, three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in a default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a non-held state. Has been.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 28A-1, an effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, since the effect button 136e is in an operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this example, the remaining time meter is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the depressing button 136e is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, “A reach is expected to develop. A balloon FD1 including the characters “yo” is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136e has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. Note that the confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 (the display timing and the audio output timing may vary depending on the display control, audio output control, and signal transmission / reception timing, etc.). May be output at a timing before the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1, or may be output at a timing after the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1. May be. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. In this example, the princess Chibi character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character image CH is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that an effect is further performed by operating the effect button 136e.

  Then, when the pressing operation is further performed once by the effect button 136e, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-4), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image GY of the spider, "Is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136e has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. The confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a later timing than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. In this example, the character image GY of the frog and the balloon FD2 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the character image GY of the frog is displayed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  Needless to say, the contents of the character image and the speech balloon that appear in the conversation announcement effect are not limited to those described above, and various kinds can be adopted. In addition, the number of conversation notices executed in one conversation notice effect is not limited to two, but may be executed only once, or may be executed three or more times.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one press operation (single operation) by the effect button 136e. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136e is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136e by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of operations can be performed using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a repeated operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the effect button 136e is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136e is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, conversation notices may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo continuous hitting operations. Further, when the conversation advance notice is executed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the confirmation sound described above may not be output. Further, the deviation width between the timing at which the character image and the speech balloon are displayed in the conversation announcement effect and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, each time the conversation notice is executed, the character image and the speech balloon are added and displayed. However, the character image and the speech balloon are not added, and only the characters included in the speech balloon are displayed. May be changed. For example, the first operation button 136e displays the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters “A reach is expected to develop”, and then the second operation button 136e is operated. Thus, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to “Let's get a chance when the bag appears”.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the second stage conversation notice is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136e is pressed for a long time.

  Also, in this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the second stage conversation notice is more than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic repeated hit function is in an effective state, the conversation notice executed as a result of the repeated hit operation of the effect button 136e is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, FIG. 28 (b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being displayed. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. . In this effect example, the effect button 136e is in an operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. The effect button lamp 138 may be lit in red, for example.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), when one press operation is performed by the effect button 136e, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the fourth operation at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (b-2). The special figure 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode imitating the face of Tono-sama. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. 29 (a-1) to 29 (a-4) and 29 (b-1) to 29 (b-4), there is an effect of operating the effect button 136e during the decorative display variation display. It shows how multiple events are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (a-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 29 (a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 29 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (a-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (a-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Also, in this effect example, since the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the operation of the effect button 136e is not treated as valid, As shown in 29 (a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any production button production. The first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. And it may be started at a timing later than the start of the second effect button effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (b-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 29 (b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Also, in FIG. 29 (b-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (b-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state. In this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but the long press auto-strike function is in an active state. As shown in FIG. 29 (b-4), only the result of the operation of the effect button 136e related to the first effect button effect is displayed among the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136e related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. The result of the operation of the effect button 136e related to which effect button effect is displayed may be performed only for the effect that started earlier, for example, or an effect that is preferentially executed is determined in advance. It may be.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 30 shows a state where another effect of operating the effect button 136e is started during the execution of the effect of operating the effect button 136e.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 30A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 30 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136e is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed at the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136e is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when the long press operation with the effect button 136e is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation with the effect button 136e, and as shown in FIG. In the device 208, a balloon FD1 including characters “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 30 (e), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp 218 Four hold lamps light up. Then, in the reserved display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed with a hold icon in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of a second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, since the second effect button effect is an effect started after the first effect button effect, this effect is obtained when the long press operation of the effect button 136e is continued. The result of the operation of the effect button 136e related to the button image BTH is not displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon FD2 including the characters “Let's appear when chances are up” is displayed together with the character image GY of the spider at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  In this effect example, only the conversation notice effect is executed and not the hold change notice. However, the hold change notice is continuously executed after the conversation notice effect is ended by the long press auto-strike function. Alternatively, the hold change notice may be executed by once releasing the pressing operation of the effect button 136e and then pressing the button again after the conversation notice effect is finished.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 31 shows a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136e in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the variation variation of the decorative symbol. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol “7”. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is still performed and the reach state is reached. FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the state is shifted to super reach after reaching the reach state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, “Princess Dance SP Reach” indicating the type of the super reach that has been transferred, and “Press the flowing button at the right timing” to explain the contents of the effect are displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Mode 3” indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels. For example, the difficulty level is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 31 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is two, the two hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In this production example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Then, after the “princess dance SP reach” is started, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character image HM dances to music on the left side of the display screen. The animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed to move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. The hit image HT is displayed on the screen. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT according to music.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the player depresses the effect button 136e at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the timing image TM is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (d). It changes to result display RS according to the timing of operation of 136e. The result display RS is displayed in a manner including a character display of “PERFECT”, for example, when the pressing operation of the effect button 136e is accepted at the timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly shifted. When the press operation of the effect button 136e is accepted at a timing that is displayed, it is displayed in a form including the character display of “GOOD”. A mode including the character display is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of pressing the effect button 136e, and a notice effect corresponding to the final point is executed. If the operation by the effect button 136e is not performed at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the result image is not scrolled to the result display RS but is scrolled out to the lower side of the display screen.

  In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the pseudo effect button 136e may be repeatedly operated at regular intervals, other than the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. When the pseudo effect button 136e is operated at the timing, the point may be subtracted to reduce the possibility of executing the notice effect. Thereby, it becomes an incentive for the player to operate the effect button 136e at the player's own timing without relying on the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect can be improved. In addition, by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, only when the timing image TM completely coincides with the hit image HT (timing that becomes “PERFECT”) or slightly shifted (timing that becomes “GOOD”), The effect button 136e may be configured to be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 32 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the auto button function is released, and FIG. 32 (b) shows how the auto button function is set. FIG. 32 (c) shows a state in which a preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136e is notified, and FIGS. 32 (d-1) to (d-3) show that the auto button function is effective. In this state, the back button effect is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of losing, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the first special figure display device 212. In correspondence with the display result of, the display result of the deviation (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Yes. That is, FIG. 32 (a-1) represents a standby state in which symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136e is not in the operation acceptance state. In this effect example, for example, in this standby state, the auto button function can be set to an effective state by simultaneously pressing the left button 136c and the right button 136d.

  As described above, when the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-3), for example, when a button other than the effect button 136e (for example, the left button 136c) is operated when the auto button function is enabled, As shown in 32 (a-4), the auto button function is canceled. That is, the auto button function is disabled. In addition, in a state where the auto button function is valid, the auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136e, or the left button 136c and the right button 136d are simultaneously pressed. Thus, the auto button function may be canceled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “auto button is being set” to indicate to the player the auto button function. You may make it alert | report easily that it recognizes that a button function is an effective state.

  The operation when the auto button function is in effect is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 32C, when the effect related to the effect button 136e is being executed, the auto button When the effect button 136e is operated in a pseudo manner by the function, an advantageous timing for operating the effect button 136e is notified. When the effect button 136e is operated at this timing, the auto button function is used. An effect different from the effect executed by operating the effect button 136e in a pseudo manner may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when an effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136e, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136e is displayed. For example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136e is displayed. Without performing, the back effect may be executed when the operation of the effect button 136e is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (d-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation. Further, in FIG. 32 (d-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In FIG. 32 (d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, indicating that the auto button function is active.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (d-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and in response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 The decorative display of the decorative design is started, and the display of the special design 1 and the fourth design t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in this effect example, the display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136e is not performed, but when the effect button 136e is operated, the back button effect can be executed. Note that the back button effect can be executed on the condition that, for example, whether or not to execute the back button effect is determined based on the result of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined auto button function is activated, a single operation by the effect button 136e is performed in a pseudo manner by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (d-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as a back button effect.

  The above-described effect example shows that the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136e is performed even when the auto button function is enabled.

  In the example of production described above, the back button effect is executed by a single operation with the effect button 136e. However, for example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed, the back button effect is performed. Also good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136e. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, when the effect button 136e is continuously pressed down before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136e is started, the operation of the effect button 136e may not be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136e. On the other hand, when the effect button 136e is continuously pressed down before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136e is started, the operation of the effect button 136e may be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is not possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136e.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect contents (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the effect button 136e is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is performed by a single operation by the effect button 136e. May be the same as the content of the effect that is executed in the event that the effect button 136e is operated in a pseudo manner by the auto button function. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed when it is interrupted.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 33, a first effect button 136eA and a second effect button 136eB are provided as effect buttons, and an effect related to the effect button is executed in accordance with these operations. It is configured. 33 (a-1) to FIG. 33 (a-7), FIG. 33 (b-1) to FIG. 33 (b-4), and FIG. 33 (c-1) to FIG. 33 (c-6). Shows a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the first effect button 136eA or the second effect button 136eB during the decorative symbol variation display. In this example, the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB have different button shapes, but the same shape may be used.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a-1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 33 (a-1), the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, so the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136eA and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 33 (a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (a-3), the first presentation button 136eA is pressed once, but the operation result is not displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (a-4). The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, when the first effect button 136eA is operated, the effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 33 (a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136eA and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB emits red light. Thereby, the player may recognize that the operation result is displayed by operating the second effect button 136eB.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (a-6), when a single press operation is performed with the second effect button 136eB, as shown in FIG. 33 (a-7), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the example of production described above, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second production button 136eB. For example, a long press operation with the second production button 136eB is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136eB.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136eB is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. For example, when the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33A-1 is executed, FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136eB by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the second effect button 136eB may be released once and the second effect button 136eB must be pressed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (a-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136eA and the second production button 136eB are once released and the second production button 136eB needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (b-1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In FIG. 33 (b-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 33 (b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136eA emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB is turned off. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (b-4), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136eB in which the effect button lamp is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 33 (b-3), as shown in FIG. 33 (b-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed. In this way, in this effect example, the effect button lamp of the effect button whose operation result is to be displayed is turned off, and the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if operated is emitted. In some cases, the player can have an unexpected performance, and the effect can be improved.

  In the example of production described above, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second production button 136eB. For example, a long press operation with the second production button 136eB is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136eB.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB. In the case where the long press auto-strike function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press auto-strike function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136eB is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is executed, FIG. 33 (b) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136eB by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the second effect button 136eB may be released once and the second effect button 136eB must be pressed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (b-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136eA and the second production button 136eB are once released, and the second production button 136eB needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 33 (c-1), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, so the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136eA and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB are turned off.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 33 (c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (c-3), the first presentation button 136eA is pressed once, but the operation result is not displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (a-4). The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, when the first effect button 136eA is operated, the effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 33 (c-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136eA and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136eB are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (c-5), in this effect example, both effect button lamps of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB remain off.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (c-5), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136eB, as shown in FIG. 33 (c-6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the example of production described above, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second production button 136eB. For example, a long press operation with the second production button 136eB is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136eB.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press auto-strike function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136eB is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136eB is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is executed, FIG. 33 (c) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136eB by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the second effect button 136eB may be released once and the second effect button 136eB must be pressed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136eB is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 33 (c-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136eA and the second effect button 136eB may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136eA and the second production button 136eB are once released, and the second production button 136eB needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 34 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. For example, when the performance button 136e is operated when the character image Y of Tono-sama is selectable, the character that appears after the end of the jackpot game is determined to be the character of Tono-sama, and the character image H of the princess is selected. When the production button 136e is operated when it becomes possible, the character that appears after the end of the big hit game is determined to be a princess character, and when the character image G of the samurai is selectable, When the effect button 136e is operated, the character that appears after the end of the big hit game is determined to be a samurai character. Below these character images, icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

  Then, when the right button 136d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (b), as shown in FIG. 34 (c), Tono-sama character image Y, princess character image H, and samurai character image Display that rotates counterclockwise so that the character image G draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the heel character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the heel character image G is in a selectable state. Thereafter, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) to (f). As shown in FIG. 34 (f), the character image G of the heel is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. Making the princess character image H selectable can be realized by further pressing once with the right button 136d in the state shown in FIG. 34 (f). In other words, in this effect example, the princess character image H is displayed in the first operation mode as compared with the case where the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. When the left button 136c is pressed once, the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G are displayed to rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

  In this production example, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, only the character image remains at the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation. The character selection cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Also, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the rotation display animation is omitted, and the character image that is in a selectable state is displayed at the position of the front of the display screen. For example, when a single pressing operation with the right button 136d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 34C, FIGS. 34D to 34E are displayed. The animation of the rotation display shown in FIG. 34 may be omitted and displayed in the form shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the character selection effect is the first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In addition, in this production example, the production by the princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fourth production that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, and even if a long-press operation is performed, only one character image that can be selected is transferred, so the first selection display During execution of the operation means, even if the operation means is operated for more than the first time, the operation means is configured to be operated once. be able to.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 35 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the right button 136d before the start of the character selection effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 35B, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this effect example, since the right button 136d is continuously pressed, the continuous operation of the right button 136d is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 35 (b) to 35 (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed every time the pseudo right button 136d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, if the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 35B, the display positions of the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G are maintained. As shown in FIG. 35C, the spear character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y is displayed, and the lord's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess's character image H is displayed. The princess character image H is displayed at the position where the frog character image G was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the frog character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 136d is continuously hit, and the princess character image H is selected even when the right button is pressed for a long time.

  In this effect example, even if the long-press auto-strike function is valid, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long-press auto-strike function In the case of performing the pseudo continuous hit operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function, the left button 136c or the right button 136d is pressed after the character selection effect is started. It may be necessary to press it again. Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be limited.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the character selection effect is the second that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In this production example, the princess character image H can be selected when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display.

  In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 36 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. In this effect example, the auto button function is enabled, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this production example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the repeated operation of the right button 136d is performed in a pseudo manner. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 36B to 36E, the character selection cancel display described above is performed for each operation of the pseudo right button 136d (for example, every 200 ms). Note that when the auto button function is enabled, the left button 136c may be pseudo-operated.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 37 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect that is performed at the start of a big hit is performed. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “Select a character” is performed, and an explanation display in a character selection effect is performed. Also, Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Princess character image H is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and Samurai character image G is displayed slightly darkly on the left side of the display screen. . The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in a state in which a part is covered by the character display described above. In this effect example, a character that is in a selectable state can be changed by operating the effect button 136e, and a character that is selectable at the end timing of the character selection effect (a character corresponding to a brightly displayed character image) ) Is determined as a character appearing in the big hit game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the character selection effect as shown in FIG. 37 (c) after the character display "START" is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (c), characters “PUSH” are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, together with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button image 136e, below these character images. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In addition, a balloon including a character display “Press the button to select a character” is displayed on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 37 (d), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Is displayed.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136e is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (e), as shown in FIG. 37 (f), the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the kite The display of rotating in a counterclockwise direction so that the character image G of the character draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable. Thereafter, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 37 (f) to (i). As shown in FIG. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time the depressing operation is performed by the effect button 136e.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136e is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character image is replaced without changing the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation is performed. Cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

  In the case where the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be enabled. For example, when the long press operation of the effect button 136e is performed after the character selection effect is started, the continuous operation of the effect button 136e is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic repetitive function, and as a result, the pseudo effect button The character selection cancel display described above may be performed every 136e operation (for example, every 200 ms). Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in this effect example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display until the character selection effect ends (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is not stopped). However, while the rotation of the character image is being performed, the gauge update display may be stopped (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any of the character image Y of Tonosama character image Y, princess character image H, and spear character image G is stopped and displayed in front.

  Further, while the long press operation by the effect button 136e is being performed, the gauge update display of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, it may be possible to suppress the operation of the useless effect button 136e by the player.

  Moreover, in this production example, the present invention is applied to the selection of a character appearing in a big hit game. For example, a selection of a piece of music to be output in a big hit game or a normal game state from a plurality of types of music, The present invention can also be applied to selecting a story to be executed during a big hit game from a story.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 38 is an example of a selection effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect (treasure box selection effect) in which one of the treasure chests is selected by operating the left button 136c and the right button 136d is executed. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the treasure chest selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. The icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d are displayed side by side between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the left treasure chest image BG2. The right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 are represented by, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d are represented by, for example, white. Then, on the upper part of the display screen, a character display “Select a treasure box that can be opened with a direction key” is performed, and it is notified that a treasure box selection effect has been started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this treasure chest selection effect, the left button 136c and the right button 136d are operated to select the right treasure chest image BG1 or the left treasure chest image BG2 until the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure chest selected when the operation acceptance period elapses. An effect in which an item may appear from the image is executed.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 38B, the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode indicating that 1 second has passed, that is, in a mode in which the gauge is decreased by 1 second. Is done. At this time, the operation using the left button 136c and the right button 136d has not been performed yet.

  When the pressing operation is performed once by the left button 136c, as shown in FIG. 38C, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes the color of the icon indicating the left button 136c from white to red, The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure chest image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button has been operated. The audio output timing may be the same as the display change timing, the timing after the display change timing, or the timing before the display change timing. Also good. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (c), a state is shown in which, for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation reception period.

  Thereafter, when the operation reception period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode in which the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, and the left treasure chest image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. . Note that items appearing in the left treasure chest image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as a princess character HM as shown in FIG. 38 (e1) can also appear. In addition, as shown in FIG. 38 (e2), the treasure box image is selected, but the lid may not open and the item may not appear. The same item may appear when the left treasure chest image BG2 is selected and when the right treasure chest image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

  In the production example described above, one of the left treasure chest image BG2 and the right treasure chest image BG1 can be selected by one press operation of the left button 136c or the right button 136d. For example, the selection target is a loop. It may be. Specifically, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 38C, when the left button 136c is pressed once, the right treasure box image is displayed because the selection target is a loop. When BG1 is selected and the left button 136c is further pressed once in this state, the left treasure chest image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be in an effective state, and when the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed down, an object to be selected in accordance with the pseudo repeated hitting operation. These treasure chests may be changed sequentially. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure chest as a selection target has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the treasure chests to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo consecutive hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again after the treasure box selection effect is started.

  Further, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, if the left button 136c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 38C, the selection target is left. It may be configured not to change from the treasure box image BG2. In this case, only the confirmation sound generated by pressing the left button 136c once may be output. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. If the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed. The treasure chest image that is the target of the above may be configured not to change. Furthermore, in this case, only a confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous hit operation.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen. FIG. 39 shows how various settings are made on a menu screen that can be executed when, for example, the symbol variation display is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the figure, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a display result of detachment, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed on the first special figure display device 212. In response to, the display is stopped with a display result of deviation. Moreover, since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is 0, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state where none is held. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), a special figure 1 hold number display unit 281A is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 hold number display section 281A, “0” indicating that the hold number is 0 is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), an effect display in the standby state is performed.

  Further, at the top of the display screen, a character “display menu screen” is displayed together with an icon representing the effect button 136e, and it is notified that the screen can be shifted to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136e. ing.

  When the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136e, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 39 (b). Specifically, on the menu screen, “volume light intensity adjustment” for adjusting volume and light intensity, “member registration” for registering a player's game history by entering a password, and player's game history are acquired. Three menus of “game history” to be selected are displayed so as to be selectable. Below these menus, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136e on the right side thereof. In addition, it is notified that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 136c and the right button 136d and operating the effect button 136e. In this production example, the “game history” menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 136d twice. When the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the first game During execution of the selection display, when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, compared to when the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of a first image that is easily selected. Further, in this effect example, the menu screen can be said to be an example of a first selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In this menu screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the transition to the menu screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again after shifting to the menu screen.

  When “volume light amount adjustment” is selected as described above, the decorative design display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. That is, an “adjustment screen” is displayed at the top of the display screen to the effect that the volume and light amount can be adjusted, and below that, 11 levels of gauges 0-10 indicating the volume, 11 levels of 0 to 10 gauges indicating the brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light amount of the game board lamp 532 and the game table frame lamp 542 are displayed. Below these gauges, the characters “changed” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d, and the characters “determined” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136e on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 136c and the right button 136d, the setting for the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed, and by changing the effect button 136e, the changed volume setting In addition, it is informed that the adjustment screen can be terminated while determining that the effect is executed by the light amount setting. In this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b. After that, every time the left button 136c is pressed, the setting can be changed in the direction of decreasing the volume or the amount of light, and every time the right button 136d is pressed, the setting is changed in the direction of increasing the volume or the amount of light. be able to.

  In this adjustment screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, the volume and light amount are adjusted in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. The setting may be changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the volume and light quantity settings may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the transition to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, after the transition to the adjustment screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again. Similarly, the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b may be in a valid state or an invalid state in the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said that it is an example of the first selection display. For example, when the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is set to one time by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed, and the volume setting The audio output executed when “10” is “10” can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

  When “member registration” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. In other words, at the top of the display screen, the message “Please enter your password” is displayed to indicate that you can enter your password. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets A to Z and a cursor UB which is an underline display mode are displayed. The cursor UB indicates only one of the alphabets A to Z, and “S” is indicated on the display screen shown in FIG. In this password input screen, the cursor UB moves when the up button 136a, the down button 136b, the left button 136c, and the right button 136d are pressed, and the cursor UB indicates when the effect button 136e is pressed. The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as an input target character. If the input password is correct as a result of the alphabet being input to the 4-digit input character display area, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. Note that the password input screen can be terminated by, for example, pressing the cancel button 136f.

  In this password input screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. If the upper button 136a, the lower button 136b, the left button 136c, or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, a pseudo- It may be possible to move the cursor UB in accordance with a repeated hitting operation. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the upper button 136a, the lower button 136b, the left button 136c, and the right button 136d. May be. In the case where the long press automatic hitting function is enabled, when the upper button 136a, the lower button 136b, the left button 136c, or the right button 136d is continuously pressed before moving to the password input screen. The pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the up button 136a, the down button 136b, the left button 136c, or the right button 136d after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous hit operation. May be.

  In this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the password input screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. In the first operation mode, when the second operation is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, the first image is more easily selected than when the operation unit performs one operation by the operation unit. Can do.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, the password input screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations, and when the second operation mode is performed and the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a selectable second image. In other words, the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is displayed even when the left button 136c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time.

  When “game history” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issuance screen as shown in FIG. That is, on the upper part of the display screen, a “code issuance screen” is displayed indicating that a game history can be acquired by reading a two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means, and below that The two-dimensional code CD in which the game history of the player is coded is displayed, and the text “Please read” for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is displayed. In this effect example, the code issue screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the favorite selection screen, a “favorite selection screen” indicating that a character can be selected is displayed at the top of the display screen, and below that “character A” for causing character A to appear. , “Character B” for causing character B to appear and “Character C” for causing character C to appear are selectable. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136e on the right side thereof. It is reported that the character indicated by the cursor CL can appear by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 136c and the right button 136d and operating the effect button 136e.

  In this favorite selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is synchronized with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the transition to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the favorite selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. Then, the effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. The effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, “Song A” for outputting song A, “Song B” for outputting song B, and “Song C” for outputting song C can be selected from three selection items. Is displayed. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136e on the right side thereof. It is reported that the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 136c and the right button 136d and operating the effect button 136e.

  In this music selection screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is synchronized with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the transition to the music selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

  Note that the song selection screen shown in FIG. 39 (g) may be executed, for example, in a big hit start effect.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the music selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Song C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. Then, the song C that is output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in a valid state, the song selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “Song C” can be selected when the operation is performed a third number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. Then, the song C that is output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, at the top of the display screen, a “customization screen” is displayed indicating that various settings in the game can be individually set, and below that, function 1, function 2, and function 3 are displayed. ... And setting contents for each setting item are displayed. Below these displays, the characters “Selected” are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b, and “changed” together with the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d on the right side thereof. Is displayed, the function for changing the setting is selected by pressing the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b, and the setting for the function selected by the left button 136c and the right button 136d can be changed. Informed. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

  In this customization screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the upper button 136a or the lower button 136b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is added in accordance with the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b. Further, in the case where the long-press auto-strike is enabled, if the up button 136a or the down button 136b is continuously pressed before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo-strike operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the upper button 136a or the lower button 136b again after shifting to the customization screen.

  In addition, when the left button 136c or the right button 136d is continuously pressed in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the setting can be changed according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 136c and the right button 136d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting is enabled, if the left button 136c or the right button 136d is kept pressed before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 136c or the right button 136d again after shifting to the customization screen.

  Note that when the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 39B to 39H are displayed, the upper button 136a, the lower button 136b, the left button 136c, the right button 136d, or the effect button 136e is pressed and held. In the state where the decorative symbols change display is started and the production related to the operation of the above-described production button 136e or the like is started, the long-press auto-strike function is activated and the operation is performed. You may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous hit operation of a button, and you may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous strike operation by a long press auto-continuous strike function on the condition that the button is pushed again after the said production | presentation is started. Then, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 39 (b) to (h) are configured to be displayed in the full display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, FIG. 39 (b) to FIG. The various setting screens shown in FIG. (H) may be made smaller than the entire display screen so as to be superimposed on the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 39 (a).

  Further, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 39 (a), when one press operation by the effect button 136e is performed, the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 39C to 39H may be directly displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function. For example, in the menu screen shown in FIG. 39 (b), a setting menu for setting the ON / OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function is provided. When long press 136e is enabled, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. When the long press automatic continuous hitting function is turned off, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the production button 136e is pressed long. You may do it. Further, ON / OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be set by a predetermined operation by the operation unit 136.

  Further, in the production examples described so far, when performing the continuous hitting operation production, if the production button 136e is repeatedly hit, a video in which the production button image is repeatedly hit according to this may be displayed. Further, when the long press operation effect is executed, if the effect button 136e is pressed and held, a movie as if the effect button image is also pressed and held may be displayed. In addition, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed because the long press is performed with the effect button 136e, the effect button image is not continuously pressed in response to this, but is repeatedly pressed. You may make it display the moving image which is doing, and may display the moving image as if long-pressed. The moving image display according to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136e, and may be applied to, for example, the icons of the left button 136c and the right button 136d shown in FIG. 39, and the upper button 136a and the lower button 136b. It may be applied to the icon.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 is provided with a production movable object GM1 on the game board 200, and in the same figure, the position indicated by a chain line (of the decorative symbol display device 208). It is configured to be able to move from a position above the position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208) to a position indicated by a solid line (a position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208). As shown in FIG. 40C, the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The effect movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the rotation axis side of the front frame door 106 as a support axis, and the effect movable member GM3 is supported along the upper end side of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided, and is attached to the support shaft so as to be pivotable upward. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

  These effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 need to perform an initial operation and recognize an initial position in order to operate normally. However, the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game store clerk when operated at an unintended timing of the game store clerk performing the store opening work, for example. These production movable members GM2 and GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game clerk.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided in the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the game shop clerk. Is done. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), when a long press operation with the effect button 136e is performed within 1 minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), The initial operations of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 are performed. Thereby, during the opening of the game shop clerk, the possibility that the game shop clerk may collide with the effect movable member performing the initial operation may be reduced.

  Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3, a long press operation of the effect button 136e is performed, and the decorative symbol variation display is started while the effect button 136e is continuously pressed. Then, when the production related to the operation of the production button 136e described above is started, the long-press auto-hit function may be enabled to perform a pseudo-hit operation of the production button 136e. On the condition that the effect button 136e is pressed again after the effect is started, a pseudo continuous operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function may be performed, or the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled. Good.

  Although the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by a long press operation with the effect button 136e, the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is performed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136e. May be started, or the initial operations of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 may be started by a continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136e.

  FIG. 41 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching unit 1001 to the game area 1002 is discharged from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching unit 1001 again. In addition, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  In addition, an aspect in which the display unit 1003 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 may be employed, and a touch panel may be provided on the display unit 1003. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 1003 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136e may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, or when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  It should be noted that the long-pressing automatic repeated hitting function may be validated for only a part of the selection effects described so far, or the long-pressing automatic repeated hitting function may be validated for all of them. Further, only a part of the selection effects described so far may not be enabled for the long press automatic repeated hit function, or may not be enabled for all of the long press automatic repeated hit functions.

  Further, when the front button 106e is operated a predetermined number of times while the front frame door 106 is opened, a specific menu for setting by the game clerk may be executable. In this case, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled or may be enabled.

  In addition, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function described above may be enabled over a plurality of symbol variations, or may be disabled when a symbol is stopped and displayed, and straddled over a plurality of symbol variations. May not function.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one effect button is repeatedly pressed with a pseudo effect button by the long press automatic repeat function, an operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, reception of an operation for one effect button may be temporarily stopped, and an operation for the other effect button may be resumed after receiving an operation for the other effect button.

  Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136e, an effect lever, a touch sensor, and the like may be provided, and the long press auto-tapping function and the auto button function may be enabled for the effect lever and the touch sensor.

  Further, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the effect button 136e and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136e is illustrated as follows.

  (1) After a button effect (single operation effect) for executing a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136e is started, when a single operation is performed, an effect related to the operation result is executed. The

  (2) In the case where a single operation effect is executed a plurality of times in succession, if a long press operation is performed with the effect button 136e, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

  (3) After a button effect (continuous hit operation effect) for executing a plurality of press operations (repeated operation) by the effect button 136e is started, if a continuous hit operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The When a long press operation by the effect button 136e is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed when the long press automatic continuous hit function is valid.

  (4) When a continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136e may be executed. . When a long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be performed, so that the presentation may proceed as it is, or the presentation button 136e is operated as long-pressed. May be accepted.

  (5) In the state where the effect button 136e is continuously pressed (continuous pressed state), when the single operation effect is started, the operation by the effect button 136e is accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed, and the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed. The In this case, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed from the time when the continuous hit operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single shot operation is performed. May be. Further, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the effect button 136e is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous press state, the operation by the effect button 136e is not accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained.

  (8) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these single operation effects is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect with a high priority determined beforehand is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (9) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the continuous operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (10) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (11) When a continuous operation effect is started in a continuously pressed state, and then a single operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (12) When the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the results of the operations for these consecutive hit operation effects are executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when a continuous hit operation effect is started and then a long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect and an effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (14) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (15) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result about the long press operation effect and the effect related to the operation result about the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the long press operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the single operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136e. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production relating to the result of the operation for the single operation production is executed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of the operation about the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, after the long press operation effect is started, when a continuous hit operation effect is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136e. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production related to the result of the operation for the continuous hitting operation production is executed.

  (19) When the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in this state, the result of the operation on the long press operation effect started first is related to As long as the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation for any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the effect button 136e is used for the long press operation effect that has been started first. For example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136e is executed for a long press operation effect that is started later. There are cases where the production proceeds as it is.

  (20) After a continuous hit operation effect is started, when a long press operation is performed and a single operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic repeat function is enabled, and the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the operation result related to the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed, and the single operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result for the continuous operation effect and the result of the operation for the single operation effect Both productions are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the continuous hitting started first. Only the effect related to the operation result for the operation effect is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect related to the result of the operation for any continuous operation effect is executed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the continuous hit operation effects is also executed.

  (22) When the long press operation effect is started after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled, Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the long press operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once canceled. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the long hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, an effect related to the operation result of the continuous hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. For example, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated time of pressing the effect button 136e may be executed.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 is full]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect button generated after the second time shown in FIG. 11 when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Production display by a pseudo-run executed as a result of the operation of 136e],
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136e (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136e]
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. [For example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, execution is performed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e generated after the second time shown in FIG. 11. The effect display by the pseudo ream is not started by the long press operation with the effect button 136e],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Here, for example, the first effect may be an effect corresponding to “Le” in “Doremi”, and the second effect is, for example, “I” in “A”. It can be said that it can be said to be a corresponding production.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time [for example, a state in which the effect button 136e is pressed. Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be able to be started when the operation unit performs two or more operations in the second operation mode.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 is full]
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136e (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136e]
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plural types of displays is a first selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 34]
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [for example, a princess character image H shown in FIG. 34]
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. When the second number of operations is performed by the means, the image is easier to be selected [for example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the princess character image shown in FIG. H is not selected by the long press operation with the production button 136e],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  The effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing display other than the first selection display. The display means may always execute the first selection display or may not execute the first selection display.

  Further, the first selection display may be capable of selecting only one image among a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. Other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the first selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or may display a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game]
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIG. 21]
The fourth effect is when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 34]. It is a production that can be started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be possible to start other than when it is selected. Further, the fourth effect may be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation unit is operated for the first time period [for example, the state in which the effect button 136e is pressed is 0.5 seconds. The operation mode maintained above]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “during the execution of the first selection display, even if the operation means is being operated for more than the first time, one operation is performed by the operation means. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be selectable when two or more operations are performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 39 (f)],
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of “Character C”],
The second image can be selected when the operation unit performs a third number of operations [for example, twice] in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Image
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image among a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit, or a plurality of types of display can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit. An image other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the second selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or may display a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

  Further, the second image is displayed when the second selection display is performed, when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the second selection display. , It may be selectable only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected other than when the third number of operations are performed and when the second selection display is performed and the operation means is operated once by the operation means during the second selection display. It may be. In addition, the first production is performed when the third selection operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, and during execution of the second selection display. In the second operation mode, the selection may be made when one operation is performed by the operation unit, or during the execution of the second selection display, the operation unit in the first operation mode. Even if the third number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the second selection display, even if there is a case where the selection is not performed when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Good.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth effect may be one that can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be possible to start even in cases other than the case where it is selected. In addition, the fifth effect may be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] during execution of the first selection display.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One display among the plurality of types of display is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, FIG. Indication display by a pseudo-run that is executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136e generated after the second time shown in FIG.
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plural types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [for example, shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)). Is called a continuous hit operation effect] ”),
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” are not displayed together with the effect button image BT]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display. The display means may include a first display and a second display. Further, only the third display may be executable, or a display other than the first display, the second display, and the third display may be executable. The display means may always execute the first display, the second display, and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display, and the third display. Some or all may not be executed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started and when the operation means is long pressed. It may be possible to start other than when the is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. The first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a first light emitting state [for example, a state in which red light is emitted]
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second light emitting state [for example, a light emitting state or a blue light emitting state].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.

In addition, “the first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (a-3) and FIG. 14 (a-4). In the state of accepting the operation of the operation means, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state]
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation means is in an unacceptable state [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (a-1) and FIG. 14 (a-2). In addition, when the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first light emitting state is a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in red]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, light is emitted in blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol],
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol]
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [e.g., as shown in Fig. 20 (d) to Fig. 20 (g), during the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol. Will be repeatedly operated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The second display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The third display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display may always start display during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means. [For example, the display shown in FIG. In the case where the effect button 136e is not operated twice, it is not displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display that is not started other than when the operation means is pressed and held down.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 21, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 34]”).
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [for example, a princess character image H shown in FIG. 34]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The first image is an image that is more easily selected when the operation unit is operated a plurality of times than when the operation unit is pressed for a long time [for example, a state where the long press auto-strike function is disabled In this case, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 34 is not selected by the long press operation with the effect button 136e].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  The display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may always execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is continuously hit by the operation means and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. It may be possible to start other than the case where it is done. The first display may always start when the operation means is continuously hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, an effect by a princess character appearing after the end of the jackpot game]
The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 becomes full]
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 34] is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth display may be started only when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the fifth display may be performed during the execution of the fourth display. It may be possible to start other than when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may always start when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or the first display may be performed during execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as“ third display [for example, FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g) ), Which is a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  The first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit, or may not start when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by a long press of the operation means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 34, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In some cases, if the production button 136e is not operated twice, the princess character image H
Is not displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected other than when the operation means is pressed for a long time.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 21, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 21 is full” Etc.] ”), and
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, FIG. In the chance eye production shown in Fig. 3, the display of the three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3]] ”
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [for example, shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)). , Etc. "
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plural types of displays is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, shown in FIG. 12 (b) to FIG. 12 (h)). , Chance eyes production etc.] "),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, three times] after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. The display in the form in which three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed is not displayed unless the production button 136e is operated three times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
In addition, “including light emitting means that can emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting states [for example, an effect button lamp 138, etc.]
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One light emission state among the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red, etc.]
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (a-3) and FIG. 14 (a-4). In the state where the operation of the operation means is accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state, etc.]
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation means is in an unacceptable state [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (a-1) and FIG. 14 (a-2). In addition, when the operation means operation is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode [for example, light is emitted in red, etc.]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, blue light emission].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first display is a notice display [e.g., a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification for notifying that a big hit will be made]
The second display is a notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 12 (i), forewarning that the transition to super reach is made by gathering three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a display instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options (hereinafter referred to as“ selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. Or a display when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 39C, or a display when the light amount is indicated by the cursor CL, etc.] ”).
One of the plurality of types of display is a first option of the plurality of options [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 34, the volume “10” setting, or the light intensity “10”. Displayed on the display screen (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display [for example, a display in which the princess character image H shown in FIG. 34 is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Display in a display mode with a setting of “10” or display in a display mode with a light intensity setting of “10”, etc.] ”).
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, twice or five times] after the selection display is started. Display,
The fifth display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the selection display is displayed [for example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. In the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 34 is not selected only by the long press operation with the effect button 136e, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. The display in the display mode in which the volume setting shown in FIG. 39C is “10” is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 136d, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In the case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting shown in FIG. 39C is “10” is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 136d, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “the fifth display starts when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Display,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “when the operation unit is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the operation unit is repeatedly hit. The display of the first display may be started as a thing [For example, as shown in FIG. 21, when the effect button 136e is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is simulated. Display regarding the result of the operation as if it has been operated 20 times (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced, etc.)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “long press” means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “one of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g), the characters “continue hitting” are displayed together with the effect button image BT. Etc.]
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters “PUSH” are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIG. 12 (b) to FIG. 12 (h). Displayed display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first state is a state of accepting an operation for starting display of the first display [in other words, the first state is a state of accepting an operation of the operation means. In the first state, the display of the first display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the second display is received [in other words, the second state is a state in which an operation of the operation unit is received. In the second state, the display of the second display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds or the like] has elapsed since the first state was reached.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 12] has elapsed since the second state was reached. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second display includes a second number of times of operation of the operation means after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, three times, and the first number ( Display is started when the number of times is different from 2 or 5)
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the third display is a display including the first image,
The first image is an image including an image [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 21 (d)] indicating the appearance of the operation means [for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 21 (d). The image including the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” together with the button image BT]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image [for example, an effect button image BT1, BT2, BT3, etc. shown in FIG. 12 (b)] showing an appearance of the operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 12 (b). Thus, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT1, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT2, and the image including the images including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT3]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described above.

(Appendix 1)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means for emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that emits light in a second light emitting mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The first display is configured so that the first display can be started as the operation means is repeatedly hit when the operation means is pressed for a long time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
In the second display, a second number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, compared to a case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. The display is easier to start,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a light emitting state,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a non-light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9 or 10, wherein
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 11,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 12,
The second display is a display that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 13,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated in the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 15,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 16,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to appendix 18,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to appendix 18 or 19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 18 to 21,
The second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 18 to 22,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to attachment 25,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 23 to 26,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 18 to 27,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plural types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode in the first operation mode more than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. Is the image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A gaming machine according to appendix 29,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The game stand according to appendix 29 or 30,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 31,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that enters a light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 29 to 32,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 29 to 33,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 29 to 34,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
In the game stand described in Appendix 35,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the operation means is assumed to have been operated the first number of times in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 29 to 36,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 29 to 36,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed by means,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to appendix 39 or 40,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 41,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to appendix 42,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to appendix 42 or 43,
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is being operated is maintained for the first time or longer, the operation means has been operated once. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 44,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 45,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 46,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 47,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 51,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 136 Operation part 136a Up button 136b Down button 136c Left button 136d Right button 136e Production button 138 Production button lamp 208 Decoration design display device 212 1st special drawing display device 214 2nd special drawing display device 230 1st special drawing start 232 Second special drawing start port 234 Variable prize opening 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit

Claims (19)

A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
The one of the display of a plurality of types of display, display prompting that you pummeled the operating means to the player (hereinafter. Referred to as "third display"), and
Before SL first display, after the display of the third display is started, a display if there is a display is started when the operation means is battered,
It said first display, after the display of the third display is started, a display if there is a display is initiated when the operation means is pressed long,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display, after the display of the fourth display is started, a display displayed when the operation means is 2 or more times the operation in some cases that will be initiated,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operation means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
Equipped with light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emission states ,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state,
Said light emitting means is in a state to receive an operation of the operation means, Ru means der to be the first emission state,
Gaming table, wherein a call. The game stand according to claim 2,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
The light emitting means is in the lighting state, indicating that it is in a state of accepting the operation of the operating means,
The light emitting means is in the extinguished state, and represents that the operation means is not accepted.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one option from the plurality of options.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) displayed when a first option of the plurality of options is selected.
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display, after the display of the selected display has started, only that the operation means is pressed once length is displayed by the display is not started,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 6,
  The fifth display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a first number after the display of the selection display is started,
  The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
When the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started assuming that the operation means is repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
Long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9 , Comprising:
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10,
  The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10 or 11,
  The second state is a state of receiving an operation for starting display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 10 to 12,
  The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 10 to 13,
  The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
  The second display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number after the display of the fourth display is started,
  The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
  The third display is a display including a first image,
  The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
  The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
  The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to claim 17,
  The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
  The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.